* symtab.h (enum address_class): Remove LOC_BASEREG and
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
ad22bfe8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54
NC
59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
ad22bfe8 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d
NC
97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54
NC
119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 121section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
252b5132
RH
468@cindex dynamic symbol table
469@kindex -E
470@kindex --export-dynamic
471@item -E
472@itemx --export-dynamic
473When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
474dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
475which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
476
477If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
478contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
479mentioned in the link.
480
481If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
482back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
483dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
484linking the program itself.
485
55255dae 486You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 487be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 488See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 489
36f63dca 490@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
491@cindex big-endian objects
492@cindex endianness
493@kindex -EB
494@item -EB
495Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
496
497@cindex little-endian objects
498@kindex -EL
499@item -EL
500Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 501@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
502
503@kindex -f
504@kindex --auxiliary
505@item -f
506@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
507When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
508to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
509table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
510symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
511
512If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
513run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
514the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
515first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
516@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
517in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
518Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
519implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
520machine specific performance.
521
522This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
523will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
524
525@kindex -F
526@kindex --filter
527@item -F @var{name}
528@itemx --filter @var{name}
529When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
530the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
531of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
532on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
533
534If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
535run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
536dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
537filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
538found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
539used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
540@var{name}.
541
ff5dcc92 542Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 543toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
544object files.
545@ifclear SingleFormat
546The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 547@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 548@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
549environment variable.
550@end ifclear
551The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
552creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 553
3dbf70a2
MM
554@cindex finalization function
555@kindex -fini
556@item -fini @var{name}
557When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
558executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
559address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
560the function to call.
561
252b5132
RH
562@kindex -g
563@item -g
564Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
565
566@kindex -G
567@kindex --gpsize
568@cindex object size
569@item -G@var{value}
570@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
571Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
572@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
573MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
574sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
575
576@cindex runtime library name
577@kindex -h@var{name}
578@kindex -soname=@var{name}
579@item -h@var{name}
580@itemx -soname=@var{name}
581When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
582the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
583which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
584linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
585field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
586
587@kindex -i
588@cindex incremental link
589@item -i
590Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
591
3dbf70a2
MM
592@cindex initialization function
593@kindex -init
594@item -init @var{name}
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
597of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
598function to call.
599
252b5132 600@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
601@kindex -l@var{namespec}
602@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
603@item -l@var{namespec}
604@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
605Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
606list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
607If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
608will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
609will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 610
ff5dcc92 611On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
612files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
613and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
614called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
615@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
616indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
617to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
618@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
619
620The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
621specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
622was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
623command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
624archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
625the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
626
ff5dcc92 627See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
628archives multiple times.
629
630You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
631
632@ifset GENERIC
633This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 634if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
635behaviour of the AIX linker.
636@end ifset
637
638@cindex search directory, from cmd line
639@kindex -L@var{dir}
640@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 641@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 642@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
643Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
644for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
645option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
646in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
647on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 648@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
649order in which the options appear.
650
9c8ebd6a
DJ
651If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
652by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
653
252b5132
RH
654@ifset UsesEnvVars
655The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 656@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
657some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
658@end ifset
659
660The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
661@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
662at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
663
664@cindex emulation
665@kindex -m @var{emulation}
666@item -m@var{emulation}
667Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
668emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
669
670If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
671@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
672
673Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
674configured.
675
676@cindex link map
677@kindex -M
678@kindex --print-map
679@item -M
680@itemx --print-map
681Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
682information about the link, including the following:
683
684@itemize @bullet
685@item
3b83e13a 686Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
687@item
688How common symbols are allocated.
689@item
690All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
691which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
692@item
693The values assigned to symbols.
694
695Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
696involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
697have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
698linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
699of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
700the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
701linker script containing:
702
703@smallexample
704 foo = 1
705 foo = foo * 4
706 foo = foo + 8
707@end smallexample
708
709will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
710option is used:
711
712@smallexample
713 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
714 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
715 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
716@end smallexample
717
718See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
719scripts.
252b5132
RH
720@end itemize
721
722@kindex -n
723@cindex read-only text
724@cindex NMAGIC
725@kindex --nmagic
726@item -n
727@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 728Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 729@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
730
731@kindex -N
732@kindex --omagic
733@cindex read/write from cmd line
734@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 735@item -N
252b5132
RH
736@itemx --omagic
737Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
738not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
739libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
740mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
741is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
742specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
743
744@kindex --no-omagic
745@cindex OMAGIC
746@item --no-omagic
747This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
748sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
749be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
750shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
751
752@kindex -o @var{output}
753@kindex --output=@var{output}
754@cindex naming the output file
755@item -o @var{output}
756@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 757Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
758option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
759script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
760
761@kindex -O @var{level}
762@cindex generating optimized output
763@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 764If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 765the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
766should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
767option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
768the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
769no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
770of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 771
a712da20
NC
772@kindex -q
773@kindex --emit-relocs
774@cindex retain relocations in final executable
775@item -q
776@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 777Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
778Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
779order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
780in larger executables.
781
dbab7a7b
NC
782This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
783
4f471f39
RS
784@kindex --force-dynamic
785@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
786@item --force-dynamic
787Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
788to VxWorks targets.
789
252b5132
RH
790@cindex partial link
791@cindex relocatable output
792@kindex -r
1049f94e 793@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 794@item -r
1049f94e 795@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 796Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 797turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
798linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
799magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
800@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 801@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
802If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
803linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
804constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
805
62bf86b4
HPN
806When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
807partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
808relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
809example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
810with input files in other formats at all.
811
252b5132
RH
812This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
813
814@kindex -R @var{file}
815@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
816@cindex symbol-only input
817@item -R @var{filename}
818@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
819Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
820relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
821to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
822programs. You may use this option more than once.
823
ff5dcc92 824For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 825followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 826the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
827
828@kindex -s
829@kindex --strip-all
830@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 831@item -s
252b5132
RH
832@itemx --strip-all
833Omit all symbol information from the output file.
834
835@kindex -S
836@kindex --strip-debug
837@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 838@item -S
252b5132
RH
839@itemx --strip-debug
840Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
841
842@kindex -t
843@kindex --trace
844@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 845@item -t
252b5132 846@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 847Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
848
849@kindex -T @var{script}
850@kindex --script=@var{script}
851@cindex script files
852@item -T @var{scriptfile}
853@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
854Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 855@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 856@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
857output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
858the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
859specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
860options accumulate.
252b5132 861
14be8564
L
862@kindex -dT @var{script}
863@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
868
869This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
870processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
871command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
872@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
873behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
874command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
875the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
876@samp{gcc}).
877
252b5132
RH
878@kindex -u @var{symbol}
879@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
880@cindex undefined symbol
881@item -u @var{symbol}
882@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
883Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
884symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
885modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
886different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
887option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
888
889@kindex -Ur
890@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 891@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
892For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
893@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 894turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
895@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
896It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
897with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
898be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
899@samp{-r} for the others.
900
577a0623
AM
901@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
902@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
903Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
904@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
905missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
906specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
907multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
908input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
909in a linker script.
a854a4a7 910
252b5132
RH
911@kindex -v
912@kindex -V
913@kindex --version
914@cindex version
915@item -v
916@itemx --version
917@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 918Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
919lists the supported emulations.
920
921@kindex -x
922@kindex --discard-all
923@cindex deleting local symbols
924@item -x
925@itemx --discard-all
926Delete all local symbols.
927
928@kindex -X
929@kindex --discard-locals
930@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 931@item -X
252b5132 932@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
933Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
934system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
935or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
936
937@kindex -y @var{symbol}
938@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
939@cindex symbol tracing
940@item -y @var{symbol}
941@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
942Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
943option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
944to prepend an underscore.
945
946This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
947don't know where the reference is coming from.
948
949@kindex -Y @var{path}
950@item -Y @var{path}
951Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
952for Solaris compatibility.
953
954@kindex -z @var{keyword}
955@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
956The recognized keywords are:
957@table @samp
958
959@item combreloc
960Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
961lookup caching possible.
962
963@item defs
560e09e9 964Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 965shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 966
6aa29e7b
JJ
967@item execstack
968Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
969
cd6d6c15
NC
970@item initfirst
971This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
972It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
973before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
974the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
975the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
976objects.
977
978@item interpose
979Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
980but the primary executable.
981
5fa222e4
AM
982@item lazy
983When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
984dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
985the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
986Lazy binding is the default.
987
cd6d6c15
NC
988@item loadfltr
989Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
990runtime.
991
992@item muldefs
993Allows multiple definitions.
994
995@item nocombreloc
996Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
997
998@item nocopyreloc
999Disables production of copy relocs.
1000
1001@item nodefaultlib
1002Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1003ignore any default library search paths.
1004
1005@item nodelete
1006Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1007
1008@item nodlopen
1009Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1010
1011@item nodump
1012Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1013
6aa29e7b
JJ
1014@item noexecstack
1015Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1016
1017@item norelro
1018Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1019
cd6d6c15
NC
1020@item now
1021When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1022dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1023when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1024deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1025first called.
1026
1027@item origin
1028Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1029
6aa29e7b
JJ
1030@item relro
1031Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
24718e3b
L
1033@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1034Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1035
1036@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1037Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1038
cd6d6c15
NC
1039@end table
1040
ece2d90e 1041Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1042
1043@kindex -(
1044@cindex groups of archives
1045@item -( @var{archives} -)
1046@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1047The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1048either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1049
1050The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1051references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1052the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1053archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1054object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1055would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1056they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1057resolved.
1058
1059Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1060it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1061more archives.
1062
69da35b5
NC
1063@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1064@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1065@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1066@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1067Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1068recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1069and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1070the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1071behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1072so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1073restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1074
4a43e768
AM
1075@kindex --as-needed
1076@kindex --no-as-needed
1077@item --as-needed
1078@itemx --no-as-needed
1079This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1080on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1081the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1082on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1083needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1084for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1085which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1086@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1087
e56f61be
L
1088@kindex --add-needed
1089@kindex --no-add-needed
1090@item --add-needed
1091@itemx --no-add-needed
1092This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1093DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1094the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1095a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1096@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1097for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1098the default behaviour.
1099
252b5132
RH
1100@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1101@item -assert @var{keyword}
1102This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1103
1104@kindex -Bdynamic
1105@kindex -dy
1106@kindex -call_shared
1107@item -Bdynamic
1108@itemx -dy
1109@itemx -call_shared
1110Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1111for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1112default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1113for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1114multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1115@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1116
a1ab1d2a
UD
1117@kindex -Bgroup
1118@item -Bgroup
1119Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1120section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1121object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1122@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1123only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1124
252b5132
RH
1125@kindex -Bstatic
1126@kindex -dn
1127@kindex -non_shared
1128@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1129@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1130@itemx -dn
1131@itemx -non_shared
1132@itemx -static
1133Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1134platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1135variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1136may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1137library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1138option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1139option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1140shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1141references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1142libraries.
252b5132
RH
1143
1144@kindex -Bsymbolic
1145@item -Bsymbolic
1146When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1147definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1148for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1149within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1150platforms which support shared libraries.
1151
40b36307
L
1152@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1153@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1154When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1155symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1156This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1157libraries.
1158
55255dae
L
1159@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1160@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1161Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1162typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1163global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1164within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1165to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1166in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1167which support shared libraries.
1168
1169The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1170scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1171
40b36307
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1173@item --dynamic-list-data
1174Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1175
1176@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1177@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1178Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1179is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1180
0b8a70d9
L
1181@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1182@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1183Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1184
252b5132
RH
1185@kindex --check-sections
1186@kindex --no-check-sections
1187@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1188@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1189Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1190been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1191perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1192suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1193allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1194restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1195
1196@cindex cross reference table
1197@kindex --cref
1198@item --cref
1199Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1200generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1201Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1202
1203The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1204easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1205sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1206symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1207definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1208
4818e05f
AM
1209@cindex common allocation
1210@kindex --no-define-common
1211@item --no-define-common
1212This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1213The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1214@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1215
1216The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1217the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1218of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1219forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1220Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1221from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1222This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1223and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1224duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1225paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1226
252b5132
RH
1227@cindex symbols, from command line
1228@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1229@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1230Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1231address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1232times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1233limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1234context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1235symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1236constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1237using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1238Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1239space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1240@var{expression}.
1241
1242@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1243@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1244@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1245@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1246@itemx --no-demangle
1247These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1248and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1249present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1250underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1251mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1252different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1253to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1254demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1255is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1256
1257@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1258@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1259@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1260@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1261Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1262generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1263linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1264doing.
1265
7ce691ae
C
1266
1267@kindex --fatal-warnings
1268@item --fatal-warnings
1269Treat all warnings as errors.
1270
252b5132
RH
1271@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1272@item --force-exe-suffix
1273Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1274
1275If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1276@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1277the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1278option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1279Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1280it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1281
1282@kindex --gc-sections
1283@kindex --no-gc-sections
1284@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1285@item --gc-sections
1286@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1287Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1288targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1289performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1290@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1291
d5465ba2
AM
1292@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1293examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1294symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1295command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1296referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1297libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1298referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1299the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1300relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1301
ac69cbc6
TG
1302This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1303@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1304specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1305a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1306
c17d87de
NC
1307@kindex --print-gc-sections
1308@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1309@cindex garbage collection
1310@item --print-gc-sections
1311@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1312List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1313printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1314collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1315default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1316be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1317line.
1318
252b5132
RH
1319@cindex help
1320@cindex usage
1321@kindex --help
1322@item --help
1323Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1324
ea20a7da
CC
1325@kindex --target-help
1326@item --target-help
1327Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1328
252b5132
RH
1329@kindex -Map
1330@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1331Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1332@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1333
1334@cindex memory usage
1335@kindex --no-keep-memory
1336@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1337@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1338symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1339instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1340necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1341while linking a large executable.
1342
1343@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1344@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1345@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1346@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1347Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1348is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1349The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1350behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1351libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1352
aa713662
L
1353@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1354@kindex -z muldefs
1355@item --allow-multiple-definition
1356@itemx -z muldefs
1357Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1358report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1359first definition will be used.
1360
b79e8c78 1361@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1362@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1363@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1364@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1365Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1366This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1367determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1368shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1369how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1370
1371The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1372the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1373the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1374resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1375undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1376them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1377for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1378select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1379for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1380
31941635
L
1381@kindex --no-undefined-version
1382@item --no-undefined-version
1383Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1384it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1385will be issued instead.
1386
3e3b46e5
PB
1387@kindex --default-symver
1388@item --default-symver
1389Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1390exported symbols.
1391
1392@kindex --default-imported-symver
1393@item --default-imported-symver
1394Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1395imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1396
252b5132
RH
1397@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1398@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1399Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1400files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1401been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1402This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1403errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1404have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1405inappropriate.
1406
fe7929ce
AM
1407@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1408@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1409Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1410library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1411
252b5132
RH
1412@kindex --no-whole-archive
1413@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1414Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1415archive files.
1416
1417@cindex output file after errors
1418@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1419@item --noinhibit-exec
1420Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1421Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1422errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1423when it issues any error whatsoever.
1424
0a9c1c8e
CD
1425@kindex -nostdlib
1426@item -nostdlib
1427Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1428command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1429(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1430
252b5132
RH
1431@ifclear SingleFormat
1432@kindex --oformat
1433@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1434@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1435file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1436@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1437object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1438object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1439should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1440usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1441name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1442list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1443command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1444this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1445@end ifclear
1446
36af4a4e
JJ
1447@kindex -pie
1448@kindex --pic-executable
1449@item -pie
1450@itemx --pic-executable
1451@cindex position independent executables
1452Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1453ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1454libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1455address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1456normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1457defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1458
252b5132
RH
1459@kindex -qmagic
1460@item -qmagic
1461This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1462
1463@kindex -Qy
1464@item -Qy
1465This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1466
1467@kindex --relax
1468@cindex synthesizing linker
1469@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1470@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1471An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1472@ifset GENERIC
1473This option is only supported on a few targets.
1474@end ifset
1475@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1476@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1477@end ifset
1478@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1479@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1480@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1481@ifset XTENSA
1482@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1483@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1484@ifset M68HC11
1485@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1486@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1487@ifset POWERPC
1488@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1489@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1490
1491On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1492optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1493in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1494instructions in the output object file.
1495
1496On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1497debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1498@ifset GENERIC
1499This is known to be
1500the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1501@end ifset
1502
1503@ifset GENERIC
1504On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1505but ignored.
1506@end ifset
1507
1508@cindex retaining specified symbols
1509@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1510@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1511@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1512Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1513discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1514symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1515@ifset GENERIC
1516(such as VxWorks)
1517@end ifset
1518where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1519run-time memory.
1520
1521@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1522or symbols needed for relocations.
1523
1524You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1525line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1526
1527@ifset GENERIC
1528@item -rpath @var{dir}
1529@cindex runtime library search path
1530@kindex -rpath
1531Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1532linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1533arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1534them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1535also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1536objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1537@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1538ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1539@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1540
ff5dcc92 1541The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1542SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1543@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1544runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1545options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1546gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1547file systems.
252b5132 1548
ff5dcc92 1549For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1550followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1551the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1552@end ifset
1553
1554@ifset GENERIC
1555@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1556@kindex -rpath-link
1557@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1558When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1559happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1560of the input files.
1561
1562When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1563non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1564shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1565explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1566specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1567@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1568either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1569appearing multiple times.
1570
28c309a2
NC
1571This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1572that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1573is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1574runtime linker would do.
1575
252b5132 1576The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1577libraries:
252b5132
RH
1578@enumerate
1579@item
ff5dcc92 1580Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1581@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1582Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1583between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1584specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1585used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1586at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1587by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1588the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1589@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1590On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1591@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1592environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1593@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1594On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1595directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1596@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1597For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1598variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1599@item
ec4eb78a
L
1600For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1601@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1602libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1603@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1604@item
252b5132
RH
1605The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1606@item
1607For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1608exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1609@end enumerate
1610
1611If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1612warning and continue with the link.
1613@end ifset
1614
1615@kindex -shared
1616@kindex -Bshareable
1617@item -shared
1618@itemx -Bshareable
1619@cindex shared libraries
1620Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1621and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1622shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1623undefined symbols in the link.
1624
1625@item --sort-common
1626@kindex --sort-common
41911f68
NC
1627This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment when
1628it places them in the appropriate output sections. First come all the
1629sixteen-byte aligned symbols, then all the eight-byte, then all the
1630four-byte, then all the two-byte, and then everything else. This is to
1631prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment constraints.
252b5132 1632
bcaa7b3e
L
1633@kindex --sort-section name
1634@item --sort-section name
1635This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1636patterns in the linker script.
1637
1638@kindex --sort-section alignment
1639@item --sort-section alignment
1640This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1641patterns in the linker script.
1642
252b5132 1643@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1644@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1645Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1646each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1647size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1648
1649@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1650@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1651Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1652output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1653This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1654certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1655cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1656that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1657support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1658input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1659more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1660many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1661
1662@kindex --stats
1663@item --stats
1664Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1665as execution time and memory usage.
1666
e2243057
RS
1667@kindex --sysroot
1668@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1669Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1670configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1671that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1672
252b5132
RH
1673@kindex --traditional-format
1674@cindex traditional format
1675@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1676For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1677the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1678use the traditional format instead.
1679
1680@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1681For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1682symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1683full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1684@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1685trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1686combine duplicate entries.
1687
176355da
NC
1688@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1689@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1690Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1691address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1692times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1693line.
1694@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1695for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1696@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1697should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1698sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1699
252b5132
RH
1700@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1701@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1702@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1703@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1704@item -Tbss @var{org}
1705@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1706@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1707Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1708@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1709
560e09e9
NC
1710@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1711@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1712Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1713values for @samp{method}:
1714
1715@table @samp
1716@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1717Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1718
1719@item report-all
da8bce14 1720Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1721
1722@item ignore-in-object-files
1723Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1724ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1725
1726@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1727Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1728ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1729when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1730libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1731command line.
1732@end table
1733
1734The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1735by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1736
1737Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1738unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1739can change this to a warning.
1740
252b5132
RH
1741@kindex --verbose
1742@cindex verbose
1743@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1744@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1745Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1746supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1747the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1748
1749@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1750@cindex version script, symbol versions
1751@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1752Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1753used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1754about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1755is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1756@xref{VERSION}.
1757
7ce691ae 1758@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1759@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1760@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1761@item --warn-common
1762Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1763a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1764but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1765you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1766Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1767warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1768
1769There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1770
1771@table @samp
1772@item int i = 1;
1773A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1774file.
1775
1776@item extern int i;
1777An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1778There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1779variable somewhere.
1780
1781@item int i;
1782A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1783variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1784The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1785single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1786size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1787a definition of the same variable.
1788@end table
1789
1790The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1791Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1792just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1793encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1794a common symbol.
1795
1796@enumerate
1797@item
1798Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1799definition for the symbol.
1800@smallexample
1801@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1802 overridden by definition
1803@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1804@end smallexample
1805
1806@item
1807Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1808the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1809except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1810@smallexample
1811@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1812 overriding common
1813@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1814@end smallexample
1815
1816@item
1817Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1818@smallexample
1819@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1820 of `@var{symbol}'
1821@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1822@end smallexample
1823
1824@item
1825Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1826@smallexample
1827@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1828 overridden by larger common
1829@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1830@end smallexample
1831
1832@item
1833Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1834the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1835encountered in a different order.
1836@smallexample
1837@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1838 overriding smaller common
1839@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1840@end smallexample
1841@end enumerate
1842
1843@kindex --warn-constructors
1844@item --warn-constructors
1845Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1846object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1847detect the use of global constructors.
1848
1849@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1850@item --warn-multiple-gp
1851Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1852This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1853Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1854section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1855of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1856base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1857base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1858bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1859large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1860values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1861option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1862
1863@kindex --warn-once
1864@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1865@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1866@item --warn-once
1867Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1868which refers to it.
1869
1870@kindex --warn-section-align
1871@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1872@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1873@item --warn-section-align
1874Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1875alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1876The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1877is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1878the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1879
8fdd7217
NC
1880@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1881@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1882Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1883
560e09e9
NC
1884@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1885@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1886If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1887@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1888This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1889
1890@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1891@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1892This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1893it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1894
252b5132
RH
1895@kindex --whole-archive
1896@cindex including an entire archive
1897@item --whole-archive
1898For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1899@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1900in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1901files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1902library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1903library. This option may be used more than once.
1904
7ec229ce 1905Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1906about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1907Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1908list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1909your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1910
252b5132
RH
1911@kindex --wrap
1912@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1913Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1914@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1915undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1916@var{symbol}.
1917
1918This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1919wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1920wishes to call the system function, it should call
1921@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1922
1923Here is a trivial example:
1924
1925@smallexample
1926void *
cc2f008e 1927__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1928@{
cc2f008e 1929 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1930 return __real_malloc (c);
1931@}
1932@end smallexample
1933
ff5dcc92 1934If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1935all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1936instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1937call the real @code{malloc} function.
1938
1939You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1940links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1941you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1942file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1943call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1944
6aa29e7b
JJ
1945@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1946@item --eh-frame-hdr
1947Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1948@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1949
6c1439be
L
1950@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1951@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1952@item --enable-new-dtags
1953@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1954This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1955systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1956@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1957If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1958created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1959those options are only available for ELF systems.
1960
2d643429 1961@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1962@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1963Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1964close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1965time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1966increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1967value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1968
fdc90cb4
JJ
1969@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1970@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1971Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1972@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1973new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1974the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1975hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1976
35835446
JR
1977@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1978@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1979This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1980linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1981for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1982about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1983
4f9c04f7 1984Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 19851021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 1986run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
1987has been used.
1988
1989The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
1990enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 1991
c0065db7
RM
1992@kindex --build-id
1993@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
1994@item --build-id
1995@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
1996Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
1997The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
1998file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
1999@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2000parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2001@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2002@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2003an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2004characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2005omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2006
2007The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2008that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2009unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2010to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2011file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2012string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2013
2014Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2015@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2016@end table
2017
0285c67d
NC
2018@c man end
2019
36f63dca 2020@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2021
0285c67d
NC
2022@c man begin OPTIONS
2023
ff5dcc92 2024The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2025the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2026normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2027use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2028@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2029like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2030symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2031object file).
2032
2033In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2034support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2035PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2036values by either a space or an equals sign.
2037
ff5dcc92 2038@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2039
2040@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2041@item --add-stdcall-alias
2042If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2043as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2044[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2045
2046@kindex --base-file
2047@item --base-file @var{file}
2048Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2049addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2050@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2051[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2052
2053@kindex --dll
2054@item --dll
2055Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2056@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2057file.
bb10df36 2058[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2059
2060@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2061@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2062@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2063@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2064If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2065do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2066only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2067resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2068undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2069@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2070to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2071warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2072import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2073to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2074feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2075@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2076mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2077[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2078
2079@cindex DLLs, creating
2080@kindex --export-all-symbols
2081@item --export-all-symbols
2082If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2083be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2084otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2085explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2086attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2087option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2088@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2089@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2090exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2091re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2092such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2093@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2094@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2095Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2096not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2097extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2098(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2099These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2100@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2101@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2102@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2103@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2104[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2105
2106@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2107@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2108Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2109exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2110[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2111
2112@kindex --file-alignment
2113@item --file-alignment
2114Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2115file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2116512.
bb10df36 2117[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2118
2119@cindex heap size
2120@kindex --heap
2121@item --heap @var{reserve}
2122@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2123Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2124to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2125committed.
bb10df36 2126[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2127
2128@cindex image base
2129@kindex --image-base
2130@item --image-base @var{value}
2131Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2132the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2133is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2134your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2135other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2136for dlls.
bb10df36 2137[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2138
2139@kindex --kill-at
2140@item --kill-at
2141If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2142symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2143[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2144
26d2d8a2
BF
2145@kindex --large-address-aware
2146@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2147If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2148header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2149greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2150or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2151section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2152[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2153
252b5132
RH
2154@kindex --major-image-version
2155@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2156Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2157[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2158
2159@kindex --major-os-version
2160@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2161Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2162[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2163
2164@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2165@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2166Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2167[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2168
2169@kindex --minor-image-version
2170@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2171Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2172[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --minor-os-version
2175@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2176Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2177[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2178
2179@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2180@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2181Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2182[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2183
2184@cindex DEF files, creating
2185@cindex DLLs, creating
2186@kindex --output-def
2187@item --output-def @var{file}
2188The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2189file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2190(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2191library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2192automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2193[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2194
b044cda1
CW
2195@cindex DLLs, creating
2196@kindex --out-implib
2197@item --out-implib @var{file}
2198The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2199import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2200import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2201may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2202makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2203creation step.
bb10df36 2204[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2205
2206@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2207@item --enable-auto-image-base
2208Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2209using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2210from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2211collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2212avoided.
bb10df36 2213[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2214
2215@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2216@item --disable-auto-image-base
2217Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2218user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2219default.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2221
2222@cindex DLLs, linking to
2223@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2224@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2225When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2226search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2227@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2228between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2229uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2230@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2231[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2232
2233@kindex --enable-auto-import
2234@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2235Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2236DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2237building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2238'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2239to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2240specification published by Microsoft.
2241
e2a83dd0
NC
2242Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2243data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2244placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2245around a problem with consts that is described here:
2246http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2247
4d8907ac
DS
2248Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2249see this message:
0d888aac 2250
ece2d90e 2251"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2252documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2253
ece2d90e
NC
2254This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2255ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2256allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2257fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2258constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2259multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2260this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2261of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2262the warning, and exit.
2263
2264There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2265data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2266
2fa9fc65
NC
2267One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2268of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2269this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2270
c0065db7
RM
2271A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2272that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2273there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2274a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2275
2276@example
2277extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2278extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2279 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2280@end example
2281
2282or
2283
2284@example
2285extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2286extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2287 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2288@end example
2289
c0065db7 2290For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2291is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2292
2293@example
2294extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2295extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2296 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2297@end example
2298
c406afaf
NC
2299or
2300
2301@example
2302extern long long extern_ll;
2303extern_ll -->
2304 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2305@end example
2306
2fa9fc65 2307A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2308'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2309@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2310requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2311building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2312merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2313between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2314constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2315
2316Original:
2317@example
2318--foo.h
2319extern int arr[];
2320--foo.c
2321#include "foo.h"
2322void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2323 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2324@}
2325@end example
2326
2327Solution 1:
2328@example
2329--foo.h
2330extern int arr[];
2331--foo.c
2332#include "foo.h"
2333void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2334 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2335 volatile int *parr = arr;
2336 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2337@}
2338@end example
2339
2340Solution 2:
2341@example
2342--foo.h
2343/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2344#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2345 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2346#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2347#else
2348#define FOO_IMPORT
2349#endif
2350extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2351--foo.c
2352#include "foo.h"
2353void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2354 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2355@}
2356@end example
2357
c0065db7 2358A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2359library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2360for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2361functions).
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2363
2364@kindex --disable-auto-import
2365@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2366Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2367@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2368[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2369
2fa9fc65
NC
2370@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2371@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2372If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2373that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2374a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2375environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2377
2378@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2379@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2380Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2381DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2383
b044cda1
CW
2384@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2385@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2386Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2388
252b5132
RH
2389@kindex --section-alignment
2390@item --section-alignment
2391Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2392addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2393[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2394
2395@cindex stack size
2396@kindex --stack
2397@item --stack @var{reserve}
2398@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2399Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2400to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2401committed.
bb10df36 2402[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2403
2404@kindex --subsystem
2405@item --subsystem @var{which}
2406@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2407@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2408Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2409legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2410@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2411the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2412@var{which}.
bb10df36 2413[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2414
2415@end table
2416
0285c67d
NC
2417@c man end
2418
93fd0973
SC
2419@ifset M68HC11
2420@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2421
2422@c man begin OPTIONS
2423
2424The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2425memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2426
2427@table @gcctabopt
2428
2429@kindex --no-trampoline
2430@item --no-trampoline
2431This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2432is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2433instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2434
2435@kindex --bank-window
2436@item --bank-window @var{name}
2437This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2438the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2439The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2440paging and addresses within the memory window.
2441
2442@end table
2443
2444@c man end
2445@end ifset
2446
7fb9f789
NC
2447@ifset M68K
2448@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2449
2450@c man begin OPTIONS
2451
2452The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2453when linking for 68K targets.
2454
2455@table @gcctabopt
2456
2457@kindex --got
2458@item --got=@var{type}
2459This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2460@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2461@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2462Info entry for @file{ld}.
2463
2464@end table
2465
2466@c man end
2467@end ifset
2468
252b5132
RH
2469@ifset UsesEnvVars
2470@node Environment
2471@section Environment Variables
2472
0285c67d
NC
2473@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2474
560e09e9 2475You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2476@ifclear SingleFormat
2477@code{GNUTARGET},
2478@end ifclear
2479@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2480
36f63dca 2481@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2482@kindex GNUTARGET
2483@cindex default input format
2484@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2485use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2486of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2487@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2488of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2489attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2490this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2491there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2492object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2493BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2494in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2495@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2496
2497@kindex LDEMULATION
2498@cindex default emulation
2499@cindex emulation, default
2500@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2501@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2502behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2503available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2504the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2505variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2506linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2507
2508@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2509@cindex demangling, default
2510Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2511@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2512default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2513a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2514may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2515options.
2516
0285c67d
NC
2517@c man end
2518@end ifset
2519
252b5132
RH
2520@node Scripts
2521@chapter Linker Scripts
2522
2523@cindex scripts
2524@cindex linker scripts
2525@cindex command files
2526Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2527written in the linker command language.
2528
2529The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2530the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2531the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2532more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2533direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2534described below.
2535
2536The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2537yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2538linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2539to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2540such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2541
2542You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2543line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2544default linker script.
2545
2546You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2547to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2548Linker Scripts}.
2549
2550@menu
2551* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2552* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2553* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2554* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2555* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2556* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2557* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2558* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2559* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2560* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2561* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2562@end menu
2563
2564@node Basic Script Concepts
2565@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2566@cindex linker script concepts
2567We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2568describe the linker script language.
2569
2570The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2571file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2572@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2573The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2574purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2575among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2576section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2577in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2578
2579Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2580also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2581contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2582the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2583A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2584area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2585loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2586which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2587of debugging information.
2588
2589Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2590first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2591the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2592@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2593section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2594same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2595is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2596(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2597based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2598RAM address would be the VMA.
2599
2600You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2601program with the @samp{-h} option.
2602
2603Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2604@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2605has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2606information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2607will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2608static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2609referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2610
2611You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2612program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2613option.
2614
2615@node Script Format
2616@section Linker Script Format
2617@cindex linker script format
2618Linker scripts are text files.
2619
2620You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2621either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2622symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2623generally ignored.
2624
2625Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2626If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2627otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2628double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2629file name.
2630
2631You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2632@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2633to whitespace.
2634
2635@node Simple Example
2636@section Simple Linker Script Example
2637@cindex linker script example
2638@cindex example of linker script
2639Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2640
2641The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2642@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2643memory layout of the output file.
2644
2645The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2646describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2647code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2648@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2649Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2650your input files.
2651
2652For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26530x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2654linker script which will do that:
2655@smallexample
2656SECTIONS
2657@{
2658 . = 0x10000;
2659 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2660 . = 0x8000000;
2661 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2662 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2663@}
2664@end smallexample
2665
2666You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2667followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2668descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2669
252b5132
RH
2670The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2671sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2672counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2673other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2674current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2675incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2676@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2677
2678The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2679required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2680after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2681which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2682wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2683means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2684
2685Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2686@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2687@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2688
2689The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2690the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2691at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2692output section, the value of the location counter will be
2693@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2694effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2695immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2696
2697The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2698alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2699example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2700sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2701may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2702sections.
2703
2704That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2705
2706@node Simple Commands
2707@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2708@cindex linker script simple commands
2709In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2710
2711@menu
2712* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2713* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2714@ifclear SingleFormat
2715* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2716@end ifclear
2717
2718* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2719@end menu
2720
2721@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2722@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2723@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2724@cindex start of execution
2725@cindex first instruction
2726@cindex entry point
2727The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2728point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2729entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2730@smallexample
2731ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2732@end smallexample
2733
2734There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2735entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2736stopping when one of them succeeds:
2737@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2738@item
252b5132 2739the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2740@item
252b5132 2741the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2742@item
252b5132 2743the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2744@item
252b5132 2745the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2746@item
252b5132
RH
2747The address @code{0}.
2748@end itemize
2749
2750@node File Commands
36f63dca 2751@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2752@cindex linker script file commands
2753Several linker script commands deal with files.
2754
2755@table @code
2756@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2757@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2758@cindex including a linker script
2759Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2760be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2761with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
276210 levels deep.
2763
2764@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2765@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2766@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2767@cindex input files in linker scripts
2768@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2769@cindex linker script input object files
2770The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2771in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2772
2773For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2774a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2775then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2776
2777In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2778script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2779
e3f2db7f
AO
2780In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2781with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2782located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2783for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2784open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2785linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2786description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2787
ff5dcc92 2788If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2789name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2790@samp{-l}.
2791
2792When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2793files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2794script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2795
2796@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2797@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2798@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2799@cindex grouping input files
2800The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2801files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2802new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2803in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2804
b717d30e
JJ
2805@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2806@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2807@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2808This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2809commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2810as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2811with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2812when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2813@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2814and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2815setting afterwards.
2816
252b5132
RH
2817@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2818@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2819@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2820The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2821@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2822@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2823Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2824precedence.
2825
2826You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2827output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2828
2829@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2830@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2831@cindex library search path in linker script
2832@cindex archive search path in linker script
2833@cindex search path in linker script
2834The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2835@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2836@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2837on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2838are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2839the command line option are searched first.
2840
2841@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2842@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2843@cindex first input file
2844The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2845that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2846though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2847when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2848first file.
2849@end table
2850
2851@ifclear SingleFormat
2852@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2853@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2854A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2855
2856@table @code
2857@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2858@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2859@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2860@cindex output file format in linker script
2861The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2862output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2863exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2864(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2865line option takes precedence.
2866
2867You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2868formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2869This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2870desired endianness.
2871
2872If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2873will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2874output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2875used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2876
2877For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2878command:
2879@smallexample
2880OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2881@end smallexample
2882This says that the default format for the output file is
2883@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2884option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2885format.
2886
2887@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2888@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2889@cindex input file format in linker script
2890The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2891files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2892This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2893(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2894is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2895command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2896@end table
2897@end ifclear
2898
2899@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2900@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2901There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2902
2903@table @code
2904@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2905@kindex ASSERT
2906@cindex assertion in linker script
2907Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2908with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2909
2910@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2911@kindex EXTERN
2912@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2913Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2914symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2915modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2916each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2917command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2918
2919@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2920@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2921@cindex common allocation in linker script
2922This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2923to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2924output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2925
4818e05f
AM
2926@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2927@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2928@cindex common allocation in linker script
2929This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2930command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2931to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2932
53d25da6
AM
2933@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2934@kindex INSERT
2935@cindex insert user script into default script
2936This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2937augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2938inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2939@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2940default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2941sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2942linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2943insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2944linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2945default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2946of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2947to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2948is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2949
2950@smallexample
2951SECTIONS
2952@{
2953 OVERLAY :
2954 @{
2955 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2956 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2957 @}
2958@}
2959INSERT AFTER .text;
2960@end smallexample
2961
252b5132
RH
2962@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2963@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2964@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2965This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2966references among certain output sections.
2967
2968In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2969using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2970will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2971errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2972a function defined in the other section.
2973
2974The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2975@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2976an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2977@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2978names.
2979
2980@ifclear SingleFormat
2981@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2982@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
2983@cindex machine architecture
2984@cindex architecture
2985Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
2986of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
2987architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
2988the @samp{-f} option.
2989@end ifclear
2990@end table
2991
2992@node Assignments
2993@section Assigning Values to Symbols
2994@cindex assignment in scripts
2995@cindex symbol definition, scripts
2996@cindex variables, defining
2997You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 2998the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
2999
3000@menu
3001* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3002* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3003* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3004* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3005@end menu
3006
3007@node Simple Assignments
3008@subsection Simple Assignments
3009
3010You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3011
3012@table @code
3013@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3014@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3015@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3016@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3017@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3018@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3019@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3020@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3021@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3022@end table
3023
3024The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3025@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3026defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3027
3028The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3029may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3030
3031The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3032
3033Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3034
3035You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3036statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3037section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3038
3039The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3040expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3041
3042Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3043assignments may be used:
3044
3045@smallexample
3046floating_point = 0;
3047SECTIONS
3048@{
3049 .text :
3050 @{
3051 *(.text)
3052 _etext = .;
3053 @}
156e34dd 3054 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3055 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3056@}
3057@end smallexample
3058@noindent
3059In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3060zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3061the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3062defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3063upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3064
3065@node PROVIDE
3066@subsection PROVIDE
3067@cindex PROVIDE
3068In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3069only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3070the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3071@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3072@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3073@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3074@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3075@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3076
3077Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3078@smallexample
3079SECTIONS
3080@{
3081 .text :
3082 @{
3083 *(.text)
3084 _etext = .;
3085 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3086 @}
3087@}
3088@end smallexample
3089
3090In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3091underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3092the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3093underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3094If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3095linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3096
7af8e998
L
3097@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3098@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3099@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3100Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3101hidden and won't be exported.
3102
73ae6183
NC
3103@node Source Code Reference
3104@subsection Source Code Reference
3105
3106Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3107intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3108a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3109symbol that does not have a value.
3110
3111Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3112transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3113stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3114prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3115mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3116of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3117variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3118linker script variable might be referred to as:
3119
3120@smallexample
3121 extern int foo;
3122@end smallexample
3123
3124But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3125
3126@smallexample
3127 _foo = 1000;
3128@end smallexample
3129
3130In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3131transformation has taken place.
3132
3133When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3134things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3135in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3136second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3137table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3138contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3139value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3140
3141@smallexample
3142 int foo = 1000;
3143@end smallexample
3144
3145creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3146holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3147number 1000 is initially stored.
3148
3149When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3150first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3151memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3152So:
3153
3154@smallexample
3155 foo = 1;
3156@end smallexample
3157
3158looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3159associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3160address. Whereas:
3161
3162@smallexample
3163 int * a = & foo;
3164@end smallexample
3165
3166looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3167and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3168the variable @samp{a}.
3169
3170Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3171the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3172an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3173
3174@smallexample
3175 foo = 1000;
3176@end smallexample
3177
3178creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3179the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3180address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3181linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3182access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3183
3184Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3185you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3186use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3187section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3188linker script contains these declarations:
3189
3190@smallexample
3191@group
3192 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3193 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3194 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3195@end group
3196@end smallexample
3197
3198Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3199
3200@smallexample
3201@group
3202 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3203
73ae6183
NC
3204 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3205@end group
3206@end smallexample
3207
3208Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3209
252b5132 3210@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3211@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3212@kindex SECTIONS
3213The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3214into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3215
3216The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3217@smallexample
3218SECTIONS
3219@{
3220 @var{sections-command}
3221 @var{sections-command}
3222 @dots{}
3223@}
3224@end smallexample
3225
3226Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3227
3228@itemize @bullet
3229@item
3230an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3231@item
3232a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3233@item
3234an output section description
3235@item
3236an overlay description
3237@end itemize
3238
3239The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3240@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3241those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3242understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3243the layout of the output file.
3244
3245Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3246below.
3247
3248If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3249linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3250section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3251input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3252example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3253in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3254
3255@menu
3256* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3257* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3258* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3259* Input Section:: Input section description
3260* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3261* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3262* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3263* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3264* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3265@end menu
3266
3267@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3268@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3269The full description of an output section looks like this:
3270@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3271@group
7e7d5768 3272@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3273 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3274 @{
3275 @var{output-section-command}
3276 @var{output-section-command}
3277 @dots{}
562d3460 3278 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3279@end group
3280@end smallexample
3281
3282Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3283
3284The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3285name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3286The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3287
3288Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3289
3290@itemize @bullet
3291@item
3292a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3293@item
3294an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3295@item
3296data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3297@item
3298a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3299@end itemize
3300
3301@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3302@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3303@cindex name, section
3304@cindex section name
3305The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3306meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3307support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3308must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3309example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3310output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3311names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3312quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3313characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3314commas must be quoted.
3315
3316The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3317Discarding}.
3318
3319@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3320@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3321@cindex address, section
3322@cindex section address
3323The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3324address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3325the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3326based on the current value of the location counter.
3327
3328If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3329set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3330@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3331current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3332requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3333output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3334within the output section.
3335
3336For example,
3337@smallexample
3338.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3339@end smallexample
3340@noindent
3341and
3342@smallexample
3343.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3344@end smallexample
3345@noindent
3346are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3347@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3348counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3349counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3350section.
3351
3352The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3353For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3354so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3355do something like this:
3356@smallexample
3357.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3358@end smallexample
3359@noindent
3360This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3361aligned upward to the specified value.
3362
3363Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3364location counter.
3365
3366@node Input Section
36f63dca 3367@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3368@cindex input sections
3369@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3370The most common output section command is an input section description.
3371
3372The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3373You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3374in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3375map the input files into your memory layout.
3376
3377@menu
3378* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3379* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3380* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3381* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3382* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3383@end menu
3384
3385@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3386@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3387@cindex input section basics
3388An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3389by a list of section names in parentheses.
3390
3391The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3392describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3393
3394The most common input section description is to include all input
3395sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3396include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3397@smallexample
3398*(.text)
3399@end smallexample
3400@noindent
18625d54
CM
3401Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3402of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3403match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3404example:
252b5132 3405@smallexample
b4346c09 3406*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3407@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3408will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3409@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3410
3411There are two ways to include more than one section:
3412@smallexample
3413*(.text .rdata)
3414*(.text) *(.rdata)
3415@end smallexample
3416@noindent
3417The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3418@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3419first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3420they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3421@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3422@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3423
3424You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3425You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3426needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3427@smallexample
3428data.o(.data)
3429@end smallexample
3430
3431If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3432the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3433commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3434@smallexample
3435data.o
3436@end smallexample
3437
3438When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
3439characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3440name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3441did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3442though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3443@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3444the archive search path.
3445
3446@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3447@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3448@cindex input section wildcards
3449@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3450@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3451@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3452In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3453name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3454
3455The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3456pattern for the file name.
3457
3458The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3459
3460@table @samp
3461@item *
3462matches any number of characters
3463@item ?
3464matches any single character
3465@item [@var{chars}]
3466matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3467character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3468@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3469@item \
3470quotes the following character
3471@end table
3472
3473When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3474will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3475Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3476exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3477@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3478a @samp{/} character.
3479
3480File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3481specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3482does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3483
3484If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3485appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3486will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3487sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3488@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3489@smallexample
3490.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3491.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3492@end smallexample
3493
bcaa7b3e 3494@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3495Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3496in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3497this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3498pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3499@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3500into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3501
bcaa7b3e
L
3502@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3503@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3504difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3505ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3506
3507@cindex SORT
3508@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3509
3510When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3511can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3512
3513@enumerate
3514@item
3515@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3516It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3517sections have the same name.
3518@item
3519@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3520It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3521sections have the same alignment.
3522@item
c0065db7 3523@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3524treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3525@item
3526@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3527is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3528@item
3529All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3530@end enumerate
3531
3532When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3533section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3534takes precedence over the command line option.
3535
3536If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3537command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3538treated as nested sorting command.
3539
3540@enumerate
3541@item
3542@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3543@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3544@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3545@item
3546@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3547@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3548@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3549@end enumerate
3550
3551If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3552command line option will be ignored.
3553
252b5132
RH
3554If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3555@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3556precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3557
3558This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3559files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3560sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3561The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3562with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3563linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3564@smallexample
3565@group
3566SECTIONS @{
3567 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3568 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3569 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3570 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3571@}
3572@end group
3573@end smallexample
3574
3575@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3576@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3577@cindex common symbol placement
3578@cindex uninitialized data placement
3579A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3580file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3581linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3582named @samp{COMMON}.
3583
3584You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3585other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3586particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3587input files are placed in another section.
3588
3589In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3590@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3591@smallexample
3592.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3593@end smallexample
3594
3595@cindex scommon section
3596@cindex small common symbols
3597Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3598example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3599symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3600different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3601the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3602symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3603to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3604locations.
3605
3606@cindex [COMMON]
3607You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3608notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3609@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3610
3611@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3612@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3613@cindex KEEP
3614@cindex garbage collection
3615When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3616it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3617This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3618with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3619@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3620
3621@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3622@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3623The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3624to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3625start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3626@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3627follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3628@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3629@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3630All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3631files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3632
3633@smallexample
3634@group
3635SECTIONS @{
3636 outputa 0x10000 :
3637 @{
3638 all.o
3639 foo.o (.input1)
3640 @}
36f63dca
NC
3641@end group
3642@group
252b5132
RH
3643 outputb :
3644 @{
3645 foo.o (.input2)
3646 foo1.o (.input1)
3647 @}
36f63dca
NC
3648@end group
3649@group
252b5132
RH
3650 outputc :
3651 @{
3652 *(.input1)
3653 *(.input2)
3654 @}
3655@}
3656@end group
a1ab1d2a 3657@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3658
3659@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3660@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3661@cindex data
3662@cindex section data
3663@cindex output section data
3664@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3665@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3666@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3667@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3668@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3669You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3670@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3671an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3672parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3673value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3674counter.
3675
3676The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3677store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3678bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3679stored.
3680
3681For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3682of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3683@smallexample
3684BYTE(1)
3685LONG(addr)
3686@end smallexample
3687
3688When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3689same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3690target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3691@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3692@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3693
3694If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3695which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3696When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3697true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3698endianness of the first input object file.
3699
36f63dca 3700Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3701between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3702@smallexample
3703SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3704@end smallexample
3705whereas this will work:
3706@smallexample
3707SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3708@end smallexample
3709
252b5132
RH
3710@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3711@cindex holes, filling
3712@cindex unspecified memory
3713You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3714current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3715otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3716gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3717with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3718necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3719point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3720than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3721different parts of an output section.
3722
3723This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3724value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3725@smallexample
563e308f 3726FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3727@end smallexample
3728
3729The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3730section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3731part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3732entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3733precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3734expression.
252b5132
RH
3735
3736@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3737@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3738There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3739commands.
3740
3741@table @code
3742@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3743@cindex input filename symbols
3744@cindex filename symbols
3745@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3746The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3747The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3748file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3749the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3750
3751This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3752normally used for any other object file format.
3753
3754@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3755@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3756@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3757@item CONSTRUCTORS
3758When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3759unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3760destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3761arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3762automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3763For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3764linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3765@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3766ignored for other object file formats.
3767
3768The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3769constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3770Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3771the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3772first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3773of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3774compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3775formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3776@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3777the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3778destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3779@code{exit}.
3780
3781For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3782arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3783addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3784and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3785linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3786runtime code expects to see.
3787
3788@smallexample
3789 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3790 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3791 *(.ctors)
3792 LONG(0)
3793 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3794 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3795 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3796 *(.dtors)
3797 LONG(0)
3798 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3799@end smallexample
3800
3801If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3802which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3803are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3804are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3805command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3806@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3807@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3808@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3809
3810Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3811and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3812need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3813scripts.
3814
3815@end table
3816
3817@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3818@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3819@cindex discarding sections
3820@cindex sections, discarding
3821@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3822The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3823for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3824be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3825@smallexample
49c13adb 3826.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3827@end smallexample
3828@noindent
3829will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3830@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3831sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3832space in an output section will also create the output section.
3833
a0976ea4 3834The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3835on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3836symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3837the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3838section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3839
3840@cindex /DISCARD/
3841The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3842input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3843section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3844
3845@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3846@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3847@cindex output section attributes
3848We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3849like this:
3850@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3851@group
7e7d5768 3852@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3853 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3854 @{
3855 @var{output-section-command}
3856 @var{output-section-command}
3857 @dots{}
562d3460 3858 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3859@end group
3860@end smallexample
3861We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3862@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3863remaining section attributes.
3864
a1ab1d2a 3865@menu
252b5132
RH
3866* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3867* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3868* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3869* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3870* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3871* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3872* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3873@end menu
3874
3875@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3876@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3877Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3878parentheses. The following types are defined:
3879
3880@table @code
3881@item NOLOAD
3882The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3883loaded into memory when the program is run.
3884@item DSECT
3885@itemx COPY
3886@itemx INFO
3887@itemx OVERLAY
3888These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3889rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3890marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3891section when the program is run.
3892@end table
3893
3894@kindex NOLOAD
3895@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3896@cindex loading, preventing
3897The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3898the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3899the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3900@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3901need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3902@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3903@smallexample
3904@group
3905SECTIONS @{
3906 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3907 @dots{}
3908@}
3909@end group
3910@end smallexample
3911
3912@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3913@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3914@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3915@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3916@cindex load address
3917@cindex section load address
3918Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3919@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3920an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3921Address}).
3922
dc0b6aa0
AM
3923The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3924the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3925
3926Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3927specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3928Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3929linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3930
3931If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3932section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3933VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3934section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3935or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3936to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3937@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3938
3939@cindex ROM initialized data
3940@cindex initialized data in ROM
3941This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3942example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3943called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3944@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3945even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3946uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3947defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3948counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3949
3950@smallexample
3951@group
3952SECTIONS
3953 @{
3954 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3955 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3956 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3957 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
3958 .bss 0x3000 :
3959 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
3960@}
3961@end group
3962@end smallexample
3963
3964The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
3965this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
3966the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
3967how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
3968script.
3969
3970@smallexample
3971@group
3972extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3973char *src = &_etext;
3974char *dst = &_data;
3975
3976/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
3977while (dst < &_edata) @{
3978 *dst++ = *src++;
3979@}
3980
3981/* Zero bss */
3982for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3983 *dst = 0;
3984@end group
3985@end smallexample
3986
bbf115d3
L
3987@node Forced Output Alignment
3988@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
3989@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
3990@cindex forcing output section alignment
3991@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 3992You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 3993
7e7d5768
AM
3994@node Forced Input Alignment
3995@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
3996@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
3997@cindex forcing input section alignment
3998@cindex input section alignment
3999You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4000SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4001sections, whether larger or smaller.
4002
252b5132 4003@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4004@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4005@kindex >@var{region}
4006@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4007@cindex memory regions and sections
4008You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4009using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4010
4011Here is a simple example:
4012@smallexample
4013@group
4014MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4015SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4016@end group
4017@end smallexample
4018
4019@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4020@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4021@kindex :@var{phdr}
4022@cindex section, assigning to program header
4023@cindex program headers and sections
4024You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4025using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4026one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4027assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4028@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4029linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4030
4031Here is a simple example:
4032@smallexample
4033@group
4034PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4035SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4036@end group
4037@end smallexample
4038
4039@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4040@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4041@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4042@cindex section fill pattern
4043@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4044You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4045@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4046(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4047within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4048alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4049necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4050of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4051an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4052fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4053other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4054pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4055expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4056
4057You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4058output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4059
4060Here is a simple example:
4061@smallexample
4062@group
563e308f 4063SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4064@end group
4065@end smallexample
4066
4067@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4068@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4069@kindex OVERLAY
4070@cindex overlays
4071An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4072are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4073the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4074copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4075required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4076can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4077than another.
4078
4079Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4080@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4081output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4082command is as follows:
4083@smallexample
4084@group
4085OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4086 @{
4087 @var{secname1}
4088 @{
4089 @var{output-section-command}
4090 @var{output-section-command}
4091 @dots{}
4092 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4093 @var{secname2}
4094 @{
4095 @var{output-section-command}
4096 @var{output-section-command}
4097 @dots{}
4098 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4099 @dots{}
4100 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4101@end group
4102@end smallexample
4103
4104Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4105section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4106section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4107those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4108except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4109sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4110
4111The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4112addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4113memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4114whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4115and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4116and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4117
4118If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4119among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4120all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4121section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4122NOCROSSREFS}.
4123
4124For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4125provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4126defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4127@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4128the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4129within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4130symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4131
4132At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4133the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4134
4135Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4136@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4137@smallexample
4138@group
4139 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4140 @{
4141 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4142 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4143 @}
4144@end group
4145@end smallexample
4146@noindent
4147This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4148address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4149@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4150following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4151@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4152@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4153
4154C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4155like the following.
4156
4157@smallexample
4158@group
4159 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4160 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4161 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4162@end group
4163@end smallexample
4164
4165Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4166everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4167example could have been written identically as follows.
4168
4169@smallexample
4170@group
4171 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4172 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4173 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4174 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4175 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4176 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4177 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4178@end group
4179@end smallexample
4180
4181@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4182@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4183@kindex MEMORY
4184@cindex memory regions
4185@cindex regions of memory
4186@cindex allocating memory
4187@cindex discontinuous memory
4188The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4189memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4190
4191The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4192memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4193may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4194can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4195set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4196regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4197around to fit into the available regions.
4198
4199A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4200command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4201you wish. The syntax is:
4202@smallexample
4203@group
a1ab1d2a 4204MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4205 @{
4206 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4207 @dots{}
4208 @}
4209@end group
4210@end smallexample
4211
4212The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4213region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4214Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4215with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4216must have a distinct name.
4217
4218@cindex memory region attributes
4219The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4220whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4221not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4222@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4223section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4224the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4225them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4226
4227The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4228@table @samp
4229@item R
4230Read-only section
4231@item W
4232Read/write section
4233@item X
4234Executable section
4235@item A
4236Allocatable section
4237@item I
4238Initialized section
4239@item L
4240Same as @samp{I}
4241@item !
4242Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4243@end table
4244
4245If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4246@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4247attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4248in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4249attributes.
4250
4251@kindex ORIGIN =
4252@kindex o =
4253@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4254The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4255the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4256cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4257abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4258@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4259
4260@kindex LENGTH =
4261@kindex len =
4262@kindex l =
4263The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4264region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4265be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4266@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4267
4268In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4269available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4270and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4271linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4272is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4273or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4274explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4275region.
4276
4277@smallexample
4278@group
a1ab1d2a 4279MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4280 @{
4281 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4282 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4283 @}
4284@end group
4285@end smallexample
4286
4287Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4288specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4289@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4290a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4291output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4292was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4293the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4294output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4295region, the linker will issue an error message.
4296
3ec57632 4297It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4298expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4299@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4300
4301@smallexample
4302@group
c0065db7 4303 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4304@end group
4305@end smallexample
4306
252b5132
RH
4307@node PHDRS
4308@section PHDRS Command
4309@kindex PHDRS
4310@cindex program headers
4311@cindex ELF program headers
4312@cindex program segments
4313@cindex segments, ELF
4314The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4315@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4316loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4317program with the @samp{-p} option.
4318
4319When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4320reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4321program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4322This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4323interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4324
4325The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4326in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4327precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4328the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4329not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4330
4331The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4332generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4333ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4334
4335This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4336@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4337
4338@smallexample
4339@group
4340PHDRS
4341@{
4342 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4343 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4344@}
4345@end group
4346@end smallexample
4347
4348The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4349of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4350header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4351with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4352must have a distinct name.
4353
4354Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4355system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4356specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4357sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4358attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4359Section Phdr}.
4360
4361It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4362merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4363repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4364contain the section.
4365
4366If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4367then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4368not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4369convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4370placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4371default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4372segment at all.
4373
4374@kindex FILEHDR
4375@kindex PHDRS
4376You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4377the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4378The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4379file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4380include the ELF program headers themselves.
4381
4382The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4383value of the keyword.
4384
4385@table @asis
4386@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4387Indicates an unused program header.
4388
4389@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4390Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4391the file.
4392
4393@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4394Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4395
4396@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4397Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4398found.
4399
4400@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4401Indicates a segment holding note information.
4402
4403@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4404A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4405ABI.
4406
4407@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4408Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4409
4410@item @var{expression}
4411An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4412be used for types not defined above.
4413@end table
4414
4415You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4416in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4417@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4418Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4419output section attribute.
4420
4421The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4422which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4423explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4424an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4425header.
4426
4427Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4428headers used on a native ELF system.
4429
4430@example
4431@group
4432PHDRS
4433@{
4434 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4435 interp PT_INTERP ;
4436 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4437 data PT_LOAD ;
4438 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4439@}
4440
4441SECTIONS
4442@{
4443 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4444 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4445 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4446 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4447 @dots{}
4448 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4449 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4450 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4451 @dots{}
4452@}
4453@end group
4454@end example
4455
4456@node VERSION
4457@section VERSION Command
4458@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4459@cindex symbol versions
4460@cindex version script
4461@cindex versions of symbols
4462The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4463only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4464symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4465a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4466shared library.
4467
4468You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4469you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4470also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4471
4472The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4473@smallexample
4474VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4475@end smallexample
4476
4477The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4478Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4479version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4480version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4481version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4482scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4483library.
4484
4485The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4486examples.
4487
4488@smallexample
4489VERS_1.1 @{
4490 global:
4491 foo1;
4492 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4493 old*;
4494 original*;
4495 new*;
252b5132
RH
4496@};
4497
4498VERS_1.2 @{
4499 foo2;
4500@} VERS_1.1;
4501
4502VERS_2.0 @{
4503 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4504 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4505 ns::*;
4506 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4507 @}
252b5132
RH
4508@} VERS_1.2;
4509@end smallexample
4510
4511This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4512version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4513The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4514a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4515of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4516symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4517is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4518in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4519However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4520name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4521
4522Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4523depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4524to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4525
4526Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4527depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4528and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4529
4530When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4531specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4532unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4533unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
252b5132
RH
4534somewhere in the version script.
4535
4536The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4537they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4538could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4539However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4540
0f6bf451 4541Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4542in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4543symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4544won't.
4545
4546@smallexample
7c9c73be 4547@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4548@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4549
252b5132
RH
4550When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4551symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4552requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4553shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4554loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4555linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4556application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4557way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4558all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4559search for each symbol reference.
4560
4561The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4562doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4563that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4564functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4565the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4566required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4567that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4568versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4569the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4570
4571There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4572first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4573source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4574script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4575maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4576@smallexample
4577__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4578@end smallexample
4579@noindent
4580in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4581be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4582The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4583@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4584takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4585
4586The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4587function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4588an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4589version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4590linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4591
4592To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4593source file. Here is an example:
4594
4595@smallexample
4596__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4597__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4598__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4599__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4600@end smallexample
4601
4602In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4603unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4604example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4605@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4606
4607When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4608some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4609this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4610@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4611declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4612you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4613
4614If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4615within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4616(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4617specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4618
cb840a31
L
4619You can also specify the language in the version script:
4620
4621@smallexample
4622VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4623@end smallexample
4624
c0065db7 4625The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4626The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4627demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4628patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4629
86043bbb
MM
4630Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4631described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4632or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4633the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4634whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4635cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4636might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4637should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4638expect when you upgrade.
4639
252b5132
RH
4640@node Expressions
4641@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4642@cindex expressions
4643@cindex arithmetic
4644The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4645that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4646expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4647host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4648
4649You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4650
4651The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4652expressions.
4653
4654@menu
4655* Constants:: Constants
4656* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4657* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4658* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4659* Operators:: Operators
4660* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4661* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4662* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4663@end menu
4664
4665@node Constants
4666@subsection Constants
4667@cindex integer notation
4668@cindex constants in linker scripts
4669All constants are integers.
4670
4671As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4672octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4673hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4674
4675@cindex scaled integers
4676@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4677@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4678@cindex suffixes for integers
4679@cindex integer suffixes
4680In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4681constant by
4682@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4683@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4684@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4685@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4686@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4687@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4688@tex
4689${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4690@end tex
4691@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4692respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4693@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4694_fourk_1 = 4K;
4695_fourk_2 = 4096;
4696_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4697@end smallexample
4698
4699@node Symbols
4700@subsection Symbol Names
4701@cindex symbol names
4702@cindex names
4703@cindex quoted symbol names
4704@kindex "
4705Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4706and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4707Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4708specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4709keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4710@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4711"SECTION" = 9;
4712"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4713@end smallexample
4714
4715Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4716to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4717whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4718
ecca9871
L
4719@node Orphan Sections
4720@subsection Orphan Sections
4721@cindex orphan
4722Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4723are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4724script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4725output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4726placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4727attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4728same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4729If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4730at the end of the file.
4731
4732For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4733well as section flag.
4734
41911f68
NC
4735If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
4736the linker will automatically @xref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
4737__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4738section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4739orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4740representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4741character.
4742
252b5132
RH
4743@node Location Counter
4744@subsection The Location Counter
4745@kindex .
4746@cindex dot
4747@cindex location counter
4748@cindex current output location
4749The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4750current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4751location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4752within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4753anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4754
4755@cindex holes
4756Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4757moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4758location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4759and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4760doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4761
4762@smallexample
4763SECTIONS
4764@{
4765 output :
4766 @{
4767 file1(.text)
4768 . = . + 1000;
4769 file2(.text)
4770 . += 1000;
4771 file3(.text)
563e308f 4772 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4773@}
4774@end smallexample
4775@noindent
4776In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4777located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4778followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4779@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4780@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4781specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4782
5c6bbab8
NC
4783@cindex dot inside sections
4784Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4785current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4786statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4787absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4788however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4789not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4790
4791@smallexample
4792SECTIONS
4793@{
4794 . = 0x100
4795 .text: @{
4796 *(.text)
4797 . = 0x200
4798 @}
4799 . = 0x500
4800 .data: @{
4801 *(.data)
4802 . += 0x600
4803 @}
4804@}
4805@end smallexample
4806
4807The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4808and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4809the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4810much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4811move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4812and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4813the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4814the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4815
b5666f2f
AM
4816@cindex dot outside sections
4817Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4818output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4819needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4820
4821@smallexample
4822SECTIONS
4823@{
4824 start_of_text = . ;
4825 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4826 end_of_text = . ;
4827
4828 start_of_data = . ;
4829 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4830 end_of_data = . ;
4831@}
4832@end smallexample
4833
4834If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4835not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4836between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4837should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4838blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4839the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4840sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4841statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4842special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4843place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4844as follows:
4845
4846@smallexample
4847SECTIONS
4848@{
4849 start_of_text = . ;
4850 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4851 end_of_text = . ;
4852
4853 start_of_data = . ;
4854 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4855 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4856 end_of_data = . ;
4857@}
4858@end smallexample
4859
4860This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4861@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4862placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4863assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4864a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4865section. So you could write:
4866
4867@smallexample
4868SECTIONS
4869@{
4870 start_of_text = . ;
4871 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4872 end_of_text = . ;
4873
4874 . = . ;
4875 start_of_data = . ;
4876 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4877 end_of_data = . ;
4878@}
4879@end smallexample
4880
4881Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4882@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4883
252b5132
RH
4884@need 2000
4885@node Operators
4886@subsection Operators
4887@cindex operators for arithmetic
4888@cindex arithmetic operators
4889@cindex precedence in expressions
4890The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4891the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4892@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4893@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4894@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4895@smallexample
4896precedence associativity Operators Notes
4897(highest)
48981 left ! - ~ (1)
48992 left * / %
49003 left + -
49014 left >> <<
49025 left == != > < <= >=
49036 left &
49047 left |
49058 left &&
49069 left ||
490710 right ? :
490811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4909(lowest)
4910@end smallexample
4911Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4912(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4913(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4914@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4915@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4916@tex
4917\vskip \baselineskip
4918%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4919\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4920\hrule
4921\halign
4922{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4923height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4924&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4925height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4926\noalign{\hrule}
4927height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4928&highest&&&&&\cr
4929% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4930&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4931&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4932&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4933&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4934&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4935&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4936&7&&left&&|&\cr
4937&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4938&9&&left&&||&\cr
4939&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4940&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4941&lowest&&&&&\cr
4942height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4943\hrule}
4944@end tex
4945@iftex
4946{
4947@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4948@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4949@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4950}
4951@end iftex
4952@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4953
4954@node Evaluation
4955@subsection Evaluation
4956@cindex lazy evaluation
4957@cindex expression evaluation order
4958The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
4959an expression when absolutely necessary.
4960
4961The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4962address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4963regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
4964as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4965
4966However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4967until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
4968other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4969for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4970
4971The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4972assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4973allocation.
4974
4975Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4976@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
4977
4978If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4979available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
4980following
4981@smallexample
4982@group
4983SECTIONS
4984 @{
a1ab1d2a 4985 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
4986 @{ *(.text) @}
4987 @}
4988@end group
4989@end smallexample
4990@noindent
4991will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
4992address}.
4993
4994@node Expression Section
4995@subsection The Section of an Expression
4996@cindex expression sections
4997@cindex absolute expressions
4998@cindex relative expressions
4999@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5000@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5001@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5002When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5003or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5004fixed offset from the base of a section.
5005
5006The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5007whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5008an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5009section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5010
5011A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5012relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5013further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5014section will be the section of the relative expression.
5015
5016A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5017through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5018will not have any particular associated section.
5019
5020You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5021to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5022create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5023section @samp{.data}:
5024@smallexample
5025SECTIONS
5026 @{
5027 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5028 @}
5029@end smallexample
5030@noindent
5031If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5032@samp{.data} section.
5033
5034@node Builtin Functions
5035@subsection Builtin Functions
5036@cindex functions in expressions
5037The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5038use in linker script expressions.
5039
5040@table @code
5041@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5042@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5043@cindex expression, absolute
5044Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5045of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5046value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5047normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5048
5049@item ADDR(@var{section})
5050@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5051@cindex section address in expression
5052Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5053script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5054the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5055identical values:
5056@smallexample
5057@group
5058SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5059 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5060 @{
252b5132
RH
5061 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5062 @dots{}
5063 @}
5064 .output :
5065 @{
5066 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5067 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5068 @}
5069@dots{} @}
5070@end group
5071@end smallexample
5072
876f4090
NS
5073@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5074@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5075@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5076@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5077@cindex round up location counter
5078@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5079@cindex round up expression
5080@cindex align expression
5081Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5082to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5083doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5084arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5085expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5086equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5087
5088Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5089next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5090variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5091input sections:
252b5132
RH
5092@smallexample
5093@group
5094SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5095 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5096 *(.data)
5097 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5098 @}
5099@dots{} @}
5100@end group
5101@end smallexample
5102@noindent
5103The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5104a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5105a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5106of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5107
5108The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5109
362c1d1a
NS
5110@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5111@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5112@cindex section alignment
5113Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5114been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5115evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5116the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5117value in that section.
5118@smallexample
5119@group
5120SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5121 .output @{
5122 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5123 @dots{}
5124 @}
5125@dots{} @}
5126@end group
5127@end smallexample
5128
252b5132
RH
5129@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5130@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5131This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5132scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5133section.
5134
2d20f7bf
JJ
5135@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5136@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5137This is equivalent to either
5138@smallexample
5139(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5140@end smallexample
5141or
5142@smallexample
5143(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5144@end smallexample
5145@noindent
5146depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5147for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5148@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5149If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5150memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5151bytes in the on-disk file.
5152
5153This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5154any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5155@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5156be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5157working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5158
5159@noindent
5160Example:
5161@smallexample
5162 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5163@end smallexample
5164
5165@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5166@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5167This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5168evaluation purposes.
5169
5170@smallexample
5171 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5172@end smallexample
5173
a4f5ad88
JJ
5174@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5175@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5176This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5177@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5178When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5179does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5180@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5181boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5182it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5183@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5184
5185@smallexample
5186 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5187@end smallexample
5188
252b5132
RH
5189@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5190@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5191@cindex symbol defaults
5192Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5193defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5194return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5195default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5196shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5197the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5198existed, its value is preserved:
5199
5200@smallexample
5201@group
5202SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5203 .text : @{
5204 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5205 @dots{}
5206 @}
5207 @dots{}
5208@}
5209@end group
5210@end smallexample
5211
3ec57632
NC
5212@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5213@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5214Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5215
252b5132
RH
5216@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5217@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5218@cindex section load address in expression
5219Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5220the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5221attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5222Section LMA}).
5223
5224@kindex MAX
5225@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5226Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5227
5228@kindex MIN
5229@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5230Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5231
5232@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5233@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5234@cindex unallocated address, next
5235Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5236This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5237use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5238output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5239
3ec57632
NC
5240@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5241@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5242Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5243
ba916c8a
MM
5244@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5245@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5246Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5247value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5248option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5249@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5250be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5251``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5252name.
5253
252b5132
RH
5254@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5255@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5256@cindex section size
5257Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5258been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5259evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5260@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5261@smallexample
5262@group
5263SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5264 .output @{
5265 .start = . ;
5266 @dots{}
5267 .end = . ;
5268 @}
5269 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5270 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5271@dots{} @}
5272@end group
5273@end smallexample
5274
5275@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5276@itemx sizeof_headers
5277@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5278@cindex header size
5279Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5280information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5281this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5282choose, to facilitate paging.
5283
5284@cindex not enough room for program headers
5285@cindex program headers, not enough room
5286When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5287@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5288number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5289addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5290additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5291room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5292the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5293script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5294you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5295command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5296@end table
5297
5298@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5299@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5300@cindex implicit linker scripts
5301If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5302an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5303linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5304linker will report an error.
5305
5306An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5307
5308Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5309assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5310commands.
5311
5312Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5313at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5314read. This can affect archive searching.
5315
5316@ifset GENERIC
5317@node Machine Dependent
5318@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5319
5320@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5321@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5322sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5323functionality are not listed.
5324
5325@menu
36f63dca
NC
5326@ifset H8300
5327* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5328@end ifset
5329@ifset I960
5330* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5331@end ifset
5332@ifset ARM
5333* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5334@end ifset
5335@ifset HPPA
5336* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5337@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5338@ifset M68K
5339* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5340@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5341@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5342* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5343@end ifset
2469cfa2 5344@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5345* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5346@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5347@ifset M68HC11
5348* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5349@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5350@ifset POWERPC
5351* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5352@end ifset
5353@ifset POWERPC64
5354* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5355@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5356@ifset SPU
5357* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5358@end ifset
74459f0e 5359@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5360* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5361@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5362@ifset WIN32
5363* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5364@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5365@ifset XTENSA
5366* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5367@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5368@end menu
5369@end ifset
5370
252b5132
RH
5371@ifset H8300
5372@ifclear GENERIC
5373@raisesections
5374@end ifclear
5375
5376@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5377@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5378
5379@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5380For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5381you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5382
5383@table @emph
5384@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5385@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5386@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5387targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5388program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5389respectively.
5390
5391@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5392@item synthesizing instructions
5393@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5394@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5395sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5396page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5397(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5398@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5399top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5400
5401@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5402@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5403biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5404which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5405page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5406(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5407@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5408the top page of memory).
5409
5410@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5411@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
541232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5413changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5414(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5415@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5416the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5417@end table
5418
5419@ifclear GENERIC
5420@lowersections
5421@end ifclear
5422@end ifset
5423
36f63dca 5424@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5425@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5426@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5427@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5428@node Renesas
5429@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5430
c2dcd04e
NC
5431@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5432H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5433options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5434@end ifset
5435@end ifclear
5436
5437@ifset I960
5438@ifclear GENERIC
5439@raisesections
5440@end ifclear
5441
5442@node i960
5443@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5444
5445@cindex i960 support
5446
5447You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5448specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5449family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5450incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5451linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5452libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5453search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5454
5455For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5456well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5457paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5458the names
5459
5460@smallexample
5461@group
5462try
5463libtry.a
5464tryca
5465libtryca.a
5466@end group
5467@end smallexample
5468
5469@noindent
5470The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5471two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5472
5473You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5474the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5475use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5476specifies a library.
5477
5478@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5479@cindex relaxing on i960
5480@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5481you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5482@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5483them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5484instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5485instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5486target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5487not itself call any subroutines).
5488
5489@ifclear GENERIC
5490@lowersections
5491@end ifclear
5492@end ifset
5493
5494@ifset ARM
5495@ifclear GENERIC
5496@raisesections
5497@end ifclear
5498
93fd0973
SC
5499@ifset M68HC11
5500@ifclear GENERIC
5501@raisesections
5502@end ifclear
5503
5504@node M68HC11/68HC12
5505@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5506
5507@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5508
5509@subsection Linker Relaxation
5510
5511For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5512optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5513
5514@table @emph
5515@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5516@item relaxing address modes
5517@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5518targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5519program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5520respectively.
5521
5522@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5523transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5524page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5525
5526@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5527When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5528of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5529addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5530@code{bset} instructions.
5531
5532@end table
5533
5534@subsection Trampoline Generation
5535
5536@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5537@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5538For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5539call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5540will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5541trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5542case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5543point to the function trampoline.
5544
5545@ifclear GENERIC
5546@lowersections
5547@end ifclear
5548@end ifset
5549
36f63dca 5550@node ARM
3674e28a 5551@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5552
5553@cindex ARM interworking support
5554@kindex --support-old-code
5555For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5556between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5557been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5558line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5559libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5560option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5561given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5562which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5563the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5564non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5565
5566@cindex thumb entry point
5567@cindex entry point, thumb
5568@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5569The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5570@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5571But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5572branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5573executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5574
e489d0ae
PB
5575@cindex BE8
5576@kindex --be8
5577The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5578executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5579The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5580
3674e28a
PB
5581@cindex TARGET1
5582@kindex --target1-rel
5583@kindex --target1-abs
5584The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5585@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5586or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5587and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5588
5589@cindex TARGET2
5590@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5591The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5592@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5593meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5594@table @samp
5595@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5596@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5597@item abs
5598@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5599@item got-rel
5600@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5601@end table
5602
319850b4
JB
5603@cindex FIX_V4BX
5604@kindex --fix-v4bx
5605The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5606specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5607interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5608also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5609
5610In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5611linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5612@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5613
5614In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5615relocations are ignored.
5616
845b51d6
PB
5617@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5618@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5619Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5620relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5621
5622@smallexample
5623TST rM, #1
5624MOVEQ PC, rM
5625BX Rn
5626@end smallexample
5627
5628This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5629and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5630condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5631
33bfe774
JB
5632@cindex USE_BLX
5633@kindex --use-blx
5634The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5635BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5636situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5637code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5638each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5639
5640This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5641specify it if you are using that target.
5642
c6dd86c6
JB
5643@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5644@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5645The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5646bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5647instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5648to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5649the support code can read the intended values.
5650
5651The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5652intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5653and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5654intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5655full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5656you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5657
5658If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5659enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5660@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5661mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5662vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5663@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5664
5665If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5666potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5667such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5668first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5669instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5670the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5671are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5672
bf21ed78
MS
5673@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5674@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5675The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5676warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5677enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5678linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5679using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5680not be diagnosed.
5681
726150b7
NC
5682@cindex PIC_VENEER
5683@kindex --pic-veneer
5684The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5685ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5686is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5687@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5688
5689@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5690@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5691The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5692code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5693perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5694placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5695controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5696The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5697duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5698group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5699code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5700where they should be placed.
5701
5702The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5703@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5704placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5705branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5706placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5707value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5708exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5709A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5710linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5711from the input sections.
5712
5713The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5714@samp{N = +1}.
5715
36f63dca
NC
5716@ifclear GENERIC
5717@lowersections
5718@end ifclear
5719@end ifset
5720
5721@ifset HPPA
5722@ifclear GENERIC
5723@raisesections
5724@end ifclear
5725
5726@node HPPA ELF32
5727@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5728@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5729@kindex --multi-subspace
5730When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5731import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5732The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5733stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5734multiple sub-spaces.
5735
5736@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5737@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5738Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5739stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5740@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5741sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5742a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5743the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5744conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5745prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5746A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5747branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5748@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5749@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5750detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5751positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5752
5753Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5754single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5755create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5756large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5757
5758@ifclear GENERIC
5759@lowersections
5760@end ifclear
5761@end ifset
5762
7fb9f789
NC
5763@ifset M68K
5764@ifclear GENERIC
5765@raisesections
5766@end ifclear
5767
5768@node M68K
5769@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5770
5771@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5772@kindex --got=@var{type}
5773The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5774The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5775@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5776the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5777@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5778entries only at non-negative offsets.
5779@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5780entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5781support such GOTs.
5782@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5783output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5784file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5785files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5786
5787@ifclear GENERIC
5788@lowersections
5789@end ifclear
5790@end ifset
5791
36f63dca
NC
5792@ifset MMIX
5793@ifclear GENERIC
5794@raisesections
5795@end ifclear
5796
5797@node MMIX
5798@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5799For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5800@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5801understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5802can translate between the two formats.
5803
5804There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5805Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5806registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5807equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5808@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5809global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5810this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5811symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5812
5813Symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5814@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special;
5815there must be only one each, even if they are local. The default linker
5816script uses these to set the default start address of a section.
5817
5818Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5819are left out from an mmo file.
5820
5821@ifclear GENERIC
5822@lowersections
5823@end ifclear
5824@end ifset
5825
5826@ifset MSP430
5827@ifclear GENERIC
5828@raisesections
5829@end ifclear
5830
5831@node MSP430
5832@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5833For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5834will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5835just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5836
5837@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5838The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5839
5840@table @code
5841@item @samp{.vectors}
5842Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5843
5844@item @samp{.bootloader}
5845Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5846in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5847
5848@item @samp{.infomem}
5849Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5850this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5851
c0065db7 5852@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5853This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5854in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5855
5856@item @samp{.noinit}
5857Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5858
c0065db7 5859The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5860@end table
5861
5862@ifclear GENERIC
5863@lowersections
5864@end ifclear
5865@end ifset
5866
2a60a7a8
AM
5867@ifset POWERPC
5868@ifclear GENERIC
5869@raisesections
5870@end ifclear
5871
5872@node PowerPC ELF32
5873@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5874@cindex PowerPC long branches
5875@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5876Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5877displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5878@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5879@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5880the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5881section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5882section exceeds 33M in size.
5883
5884@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5885@table @option
5886@cindex PowerPC PLT
5887@kindex --bss-plt
5888@item --bss-plt
5889Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5890generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5891the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5892writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5893@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5894PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5895compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5896BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5897
016687f8
AM
5898@kindex --secure-plt
5899@item --secure-plt
5900@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5901@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5902when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5903layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5904style BSS PLT.
5905
2a60a7a8
AM
5906@cindex PowerPC GOT
5907@kindex --sdata-got
5908@item --sdata-got
5909The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5910sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5911@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5912section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5913@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5914@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5915@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5916@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5917PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5918pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5919GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5920really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5921
5922@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5923@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5924@item --emit-stub-syms
5925This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5926symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5927
5928@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5929@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5930@item --no-tls-optimize
5931PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5932sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5933disable the optimization.
5934@end table
5935
5936@ifclear GENERIC
5937@lowersections
5938@end ifclear
5939@end ifset
5940
5941@ifset POWERPC64
5942@ifclear GENERIC
5943@raisesections
5944@end ifclear
5945
5946@node PowerPC64 ELF64
5947@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5948
5949@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
5950@table @option
5951@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
5952@kindex --stub-group-size
5953@item --stub-group-size
5954Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
5955by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5956@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5957sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5958a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5959the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5960conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5961prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5962A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5963branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5964@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5965@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5966detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5967positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5968
5969Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5970single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5971create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5972large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5973
5974@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
5975@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5976@item --emit-stub-syms
5977This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5978symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5979
5980@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
5981@kindex --dotsyms
5982@kindex --no-dotsyms
5983@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
5984These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
5985in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
5986function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
5987code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
5988properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
5989to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
5990@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
5991dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
5992feature.
5993
5994@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
5995@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5996@item --no-tls-optimize
5997PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5998sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5999disable the optimization.
6000
6001@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6002@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6003@item --no-opd-optimize
6004PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6005corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6006the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6007Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6008
6009@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6010@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6011@item --non-overlapping-opd
6012Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6013@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6014the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6015entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6016
6017@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6018@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6019@item --no-toc-optimize
6020PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6021entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6022reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6023marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6024marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6025relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6026unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6027reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6028discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6029reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6030code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6031optimization.
6032
6033@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6034@kindex --no-multi-toc
6035@item --no-multi-toc
6036By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6037entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6038total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6039grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6040TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6041calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6042help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
604364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6044Use this option to turn off this feature.
6045@end table
6046
6047@ifclear GENERIC
6048@lowersections
6049@end ifclear
6050@end ifset
6051
49fa1e15
AM
6052@ifset SPU
6053@ifclear GENERIC
6054@raisesections
6055@end ifclear
6056
6057@node SPU ELF
6058@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6059
6060@cindex SPU ELF options
6061@table @option
6062
6063@cindex SPU plugins
6064@kindex --plugin
6065@item --plugin
6066This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6067
6068@cindex SPU overlays
6069@kindex --no-overlays
6070@item --no-overlays
6071Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6072regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6073@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6074turns off all this special overlay handling.
6075
6076@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6077@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6078@item --emit-stub-syms
6079This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6080symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6081
6082@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6083@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6084@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6085This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6086function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6087on calls to non-overlay regions.
6088
6089@cindex SPU local store size
6090@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6091@item --local-store=lo:hi
6092@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6093the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6094range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6095
c0065db7 6096@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6097@kindex --stack-analysis
6098@item --stack-analysis
6099SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6100unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6101under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6102@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6103@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6104determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6105for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6106for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6107for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6108find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6109and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6110under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6111dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6112is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6113and calls will be given.
6114
c0065db7 6115@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6116@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6117@item --emit-stack-syms
6118This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6119in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6120These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6121functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6122functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6123such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6124The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6125@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6126@end table
6127
6128@ifclear GENERIC
6129@lowersections
6130@end ifclear
6131@end ifset
6132
36f63dca
NC
6133@ifset TICOFF
6134@ifclear GENERIC
6135@raisesections
6136@end ifclear
6137
6138@node TI COFF
6139@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6140@cindex TI COFF versions
6141@kindex --format=@var{version}
6142The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6143TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6144also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6145format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6146header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6147
6148@ifclear GENERIC
6149@lowersections
6150@end ifclear
6151@end ifset
6152
2ca22b03
NC
6153@ifset WIN32
6154@ifclear GENERIC
6155@raisesections
6156@end ifclear
6157
6158@node WIN32
6159@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6160
c0065db7 6161This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6162See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6163command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6164
6165@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6166@cindex import libraries
6167@item import libraries
69da35b5 6168The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6169libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6170regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6171archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6172support for creating such libraries provided with the
6173@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6174
c0065db7
RM
6175@item exporting DLL symbols
6176@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6177The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6178
6179@table @emph
6180@item using auto-export functionality
6181@cindex using auto-export functionality
6182By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6183which is controlled by the following command line options:
6184
0a5d968e
NC
6185@itemize
6186@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6187@item --exclude-symbols
6188@item --exclude-libs
6189@end itemize
6190
c0065db7 6191If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6192command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6193if either of the following are true:
6194
6195@itemize
6196@item A DEF file is used.
6197@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6198@end itemize
dc8465bf 6199
c0065db7
RM
6200@item using a DEF file
6201@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6202Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6203an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6204exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6205name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6206command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6207
6208@example
6209gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6210@end example
6211
0a5d968e
NC
6212Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6213@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6214
dc8465bf
NC
6215Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6216
6217@example
4b5bd4e7 6218LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6219
6220EXPORTS
6221foo
6222bar
6223_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6224another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6225var1 DATA
c0065db7 6226@end example
dc8465bf 6227
4b5bd4e7
DS
6228This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6229symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6230alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6231by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6232@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6233@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6234
6b31ad16
DS
6235The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6236name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6237the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6238
b45619c0
NC
6239When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6240library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6241@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6242executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6243
6244With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6245specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6246non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6247
6248If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6249or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6250filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6251
4b5bd4e7
DS
6252The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6253
6254@example
6255EXPORTS
6256 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6257 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6258 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6259@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6260
6261Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6262@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6263@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6264@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6265Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6266@samp{<integer>} alias.
6267
6268The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6269
6270@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6271will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6272by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6273linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6274library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6275
6276@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6277The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6278the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6279@code{*_imp__foo}).
6280
6281@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6282well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6283read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6284variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6285the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6286extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6287application will behave unexpectedly.
6288
6289@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6290it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6291symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6292API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6293the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6294
4b5bd4e7
DS
6295See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6296other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6297
6298@cindex creating a DEF file
6299While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6300with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6301
6302@item Using decorations
6303@cindex Using decorations
6304Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6305itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6306declared as:
6307
6308@example
6309__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6310__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6311@end example
6312
6313All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6314any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6315this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6316the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6317
6318Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6319decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6320instead:
6321
6322@example
6323__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6324__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6325@end example
6326
c0065db7
RM
6327This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6328when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6329variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6330code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6331of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6332omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6333@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6334information.
c0065db7 6335@end table
dc8465bf 6336
2ca22b03
NC
6337@cindex automatic data imports
6338@item automatic data imports
6339The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6340by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6341compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6342issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6343code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6344c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6345initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6346decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6347platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6348command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6349The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6350suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6351trigger the feature's use.
6352
c0065db7 6353auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6354additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6355
c0065db7 6356"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6357documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6358
c0065db7
RM
6359The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6360occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6361One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6362below.
6363
6364@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6365For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6366object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6367offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6368field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6369in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6370without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6371The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6372references.
6373
c0065db7
RM
6374The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6375be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6376themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6377runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6378compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6379support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6380run without error on an older system.
6381
c0065db7
RM
6382@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6383enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6384
6385@cindex direct linking to a dll
6386@item direct linking to a dll
6387The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6388including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6389libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6390traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6391libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6392function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6393though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6394storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6395tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6396large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6397
c0065db7 6398Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6399@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6400of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6401perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6402select the dll instead of an import library.
6403
2ca22b03 6404
69da35b5
NC
6405For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6406to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6407
6408@example
45e948fe
NC
6409libxxx.dll.a
6410xxx.dll.a
6411libxxx.a
6412xxx.lib
69da35b5 6413cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6414libxxx.dll
6415xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6416@end example
6417
69da35b5
NC
6418before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6419
c0065db7
RM
6420(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6421where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6422@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6423file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6424@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6425
c0065db7
RM
6426Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6427@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6428was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6429various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6430could coexist on the same machine.
6431
2ca22b03
NC
6432The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6433applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6434libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6435
6436@example
6437bin/
6438 cygxxx.dll
6439lib/
6440 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6441 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6442@end example
6443
c0065db7
RM
6444Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6445done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6446
64471. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6448@example
6449gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6450@end example
2ca22b03 6451
69da35b5
NC
6452However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6453(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6454@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6455not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6456
2ca22b03
NC
64572. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6458directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6459should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6460making the app/dll.
6461
6462@example
6463ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6464@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6465
6466Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6467
6468@example
6469gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6470@end example
69da35b5
NC
6471
6472This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6473perfectly legal
6474
6475@example
6476bin/
6477 cygxxx-5.dll
6478lib/
c0065db7 6479 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6480@end example
6481
dc8465bf 6482Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6483even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6484@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6485
6486Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6487wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6488
64891. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6490work with auto-imported data.
6491
dc8465bf
NC
64922. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6493import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6494symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6495for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6496possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6497
45e948fe
NC
64983. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6499critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6500in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6501stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6502
69da35b5 6503So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6504true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6505a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6506binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6507massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6508requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6509will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6510
c0065db7 6511@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6512@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6513@item adding additional names
6514Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6515A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6516exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6517when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6518import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6519
c0065db7 6520@example
dc8465bf
NC
6521LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6522
6523EXPORTS
c0065db7 6524foo
dc8465bf 6525_foo = foo
c0065db7 6526@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6527
6528The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6529
6530Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6531source code using the "weak" attribute:
6532
c0065db7
RM
6533@example
6534void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6535void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6536@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6537
6538See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6539symbols.
6540
6541@item renaming symbols
6542Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6543kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6544@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6545DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6546created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6547
c0065db7 6548@example
dc8465bf
NC
6549LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6550
6551EXPORTS
6552_foo = foo
c0065db7 6553@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6554
6555The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6556@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6557@end table
dc8465bf 6558
0a5d968e 6559Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6560unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6561If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6562@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6563that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6564@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6565renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6566to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6567the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6568In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6569which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6570
6571@cindex weak externals
6572@item weak externals
6573The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6574weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6575defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6576are three variants of weak externals:
6577@itemize
6578@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6579called lazy externals.
6580@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6581This form is not presently implemented.
6582@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6583implemented.
6584@end itemize
6585As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6586are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6587uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6588@end table
6589
6590@ifclear GENERIC
6591@lowersections
6592@end ifclear
6593@end ifset
6594
e0001a05
NC
6595@ifset XTENSA
6596@ifclear GENERIC
6597@raisesections
6598@end ifclear
6599
6600@node Xtensa
6601@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6602
6603@cindex Xtensa processors
6604The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6605@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6606specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6607keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6608example, with the command:
6609
6610@smallexample
6611SECTIONS
6612@{
6613 .text : @{
6614 *(.literal .text)
6615 @}
6616@}
6617@end smallexample
6618
6619@noindent
6620@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6621and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6622literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6623interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6624group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6625files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6626and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6627
43cd72b9 6628@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6629@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6630Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6631provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6632is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6633literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6634will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6635location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6636the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6637unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6638@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6639range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6640
6641For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6642to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6643instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6644instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6645instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6646@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6647hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6648By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6649switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6650density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6651instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6652performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6653linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6654a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6655
6656The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6657control the linker:
6658
6659@cindex Xtensa options
6660@table @option
e0001a05 6661@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6662@item --no-relax
6663Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6664by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6665relaxation.
6666
6667@item --size-opt
6668When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6669more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6670no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6671alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6672preserve the correctness of the code.
6673@end table
e0001a05
NC
6674
6675@ifclear GENERIC
6676@lowersections
6677@end ifclear
6678@end ifset
6679
252b5132
RH
6680@ifclear SingleFormat
6681@node BFD
6682@chapter BFD
6683
6684@cindex back end
6685@cindex object file management
6686@cindex object formats available
6687@kindex objdump -i
6688The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6689These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6690object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6691format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6692it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6693associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6694object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6695(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6696list all the formats available for your configuration.
6697
6698@cindex BFD requirements
6699@cindex requirements for BFD
6700As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6701several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6702BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6703formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6704been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6705BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6706may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6707
6708One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6709mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6710useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6711conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6712
6713@menu
6714* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6715@end menu
6716
6717@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6718@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6719@cindex opening object files
6720@include bfdsumm.texi
6721@end ifclear
6722
6723@node Reporting Bugs
6724@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6725@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6726@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6727
ff5dcc92 6728Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6729
6730Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6731it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6732to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6733work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6734@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6735
6736In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6737information that enables us to fix the bug.
6738
6739@menu
6740* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6741* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6742@end menu
6743
6744@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6745@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6746@cindex bug criteria
6747
6748If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6749
6750@itemize @bullet
6751@cindex fatal signal
6752@cindex linker crash
6753@cindex crash of linker
6754@item
6755If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6756@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6757
6758@cindex error on valid input
6759@item
ff5dcc92 6760If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6761
6762@cindex invalid input
6763@item
ff5dcc92 6764If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6765may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6766object files are correct.
6767
6768@item
6769If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6770improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6771@end itemize
6772
6773@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6774@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6775@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6776@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6777
6778A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6779products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6780recommend you contact that organization first.
6781
6782You can find contact information for many support companies and
6783individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6784distribution.
6785
ad22bfe8 6786@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6787Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6788@value{BUGURL}.
6789@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6790
6791The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6792@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6793fact or leave it out, state it!
6794
6795Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6796problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6797assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6798matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6799the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6800location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6801were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6802into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6803specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6804and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6805
6806Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6807the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6808on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6809
6810Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6811bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6812respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6813You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6814
6815To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6816
6817@itemize @bullet
6818@item
ff5dcc92 6819The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6820the @samp{--version} argument.
6821
6822Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6823the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6824
6825@item
ff5dcc92 6826Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6827patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6828
6829@item
6830The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6831version number.
6832
6833@item
ff5dcc92 6834What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6835``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6836
6837@item
6838The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6839observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6840list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6841sufficient.
6842
6843If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6844and then we might not encounter the bug.
6845
6846@item
6847A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6848bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6849provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6850bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6851state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6852requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6853we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6854attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6855
6856If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6857@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6858object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6859@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6860how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6861
6862@item
6863A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6864incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6865
ff5dcc92 6866Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6867will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6868not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6869a chance to make a mistake.
6870
6871Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6872say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6873copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6874C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6875and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6876fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6877you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6878any conclusion from our observations.
6879
6880@item
ff5dcc92 6881If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6882diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6883@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6884If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6885context, not by line number.
6886
6887The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6888sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6889@end itemize
6890
6891Here are some things that are not necessary:
6892
6893@itemize @bullet
6894@item
6895A description of the envelope of the bug.
6896
6897Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6898which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6899changes will not affect it.
6900
6901This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6902will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6903with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6904We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6905
6906Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6907of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6908output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6909less time, and so on.
6910
6911However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6912report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6913
6914@item
6915A patch for the bug.
6916
6917A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6918the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6919a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6920to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6921
ff5dcc92 6922Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6923construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6924through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6925able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6926fixed.
6927
6928And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6929patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6930help us to understand.
6931
6932@item
6933A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6934
6935Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6936things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6937@end itemize
6938
6939@node MRI
6940@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
6941@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
6942To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
6943linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
6944alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
6945described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
6946simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 6947@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
6948linker commands; these commands are described here.
6949
6950In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
6951file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6952features to make use of them.
6953
6954You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6955@samp{-c} command-line option.
6956
6957Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6958command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6959blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 6960MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
6961issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6962
6963Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
6964
6965You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6966lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
6967The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6968
6969@table @code
6970@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
6971@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
6972@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 6973Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
6974the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
6975@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
6976your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
6977script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
6978commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
6979input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
6980@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
6981
6982@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
6983@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
6984Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
6985in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
6986
6987@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
6988
6989@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
6990@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
6991Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
6992@var{expression} should be a power of two.
6993
6994@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
6995@item BASE @var{expression}
6996Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
6997absolute addresses) in the output file.
6998
6999@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7000@item CHIP @var{expression}
7001@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7002This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7003
7004@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7005@item END
7006This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7007
7008@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7009@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7010Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7011language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7012
7013@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7014@item
252b5132
RH
7015S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7016
7017@item
7018IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7019
7020@item
7021COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7022@samp{COFF}
7023@end enumerate
7024
7025@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7026@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7027Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7028@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7029
7030The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7031same line, with no change in its effect.
7032
7033@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7034@item LOAD @var{filename}
7035@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7036Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7037same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7038command line.
7039
7040@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7041@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7042@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7043MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7044option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7045
7046@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7047@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7048@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7049Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7050order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7051script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7052sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7053file, in the order specified.
7054
7055@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7056@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7057@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7058@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7059Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7060@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7061
7062@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7063@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7064@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7065@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7066You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7067specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7068If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7069@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7070@end table
7071
36f63dca 7072@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7073
370b66a1
CD
7074@node LD Index
7075@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7076
7077@printindex cp
7078
7079@tex
7080% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7081% meantime:
7082\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7083\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7084\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7085\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7086\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7087\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7088\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7089\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7090\page\colophon
7091% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7092@end tex
7093
252b5132 7094@bye
This page took 0.797147 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.